2007 Honda CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i
A Few Words About Safe
ty................................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glan
ce.....................................................................................................................3
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................57
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................123
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................213
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................227
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................255
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................297
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................319
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................333
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................337
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Accord Value Package Audio System
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the CR-V. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular vehicle.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SWAC00
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda CR-V was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Introduction
i
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices
record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag
system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally
required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
WARNING:
Introduction
ii
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
on the vehicle.
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Messages
Safety Labels
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Main Menu
Your CR-V has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
252
228
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iv
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
MIRROR CONTROL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
GAUGES
AUDIO SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCHES
U.S. EX-L without navigation system is shown.
(P.59)
(P.66)
(P.129)
(P.9, 25)
(P.124)
(P.231)
(P.217)
(P.215)
(P.106)
(P.82)
(P.109)
(P.9, 25)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.117)
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
Refer to the navigation system manual.
1:
2:
3:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
AUDIO SYSTEMINSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
CLOCK
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
ON/OFF SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
SHIFT LEVER
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
(P.75)
(P.76) (P.32)
(P.129)
(P.206)
(P.73)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRRORS BUTTON
(P.77)
(P.231)
(P.105)
(P.209)
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES
(P.78)
(P.78)
(P.241)
(P.203)
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.109)
HORN
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.160)
2
2
2
3
1
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 13
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 15
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 18
..Seat Belt System Components . 18
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 20
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 22
......Airbag System Components . 22
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 25
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 30
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 31
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 32
.............................Airbag Service . 33
...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 34
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 34
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 35
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 37
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 37
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 39
.......................Protecting Infants . 39
.........Protecting Small Children . 40
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41
....................Installing a Child Seat . 42
...............................With LATCH . 43
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46
..............................With a Tether . 48
...........Protecting Larger Children . 50
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 50
..................Using a Booster Seat . 51
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 52
...Additional Safety Precautions . 53
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
...................................Safety Labels . 55
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
14
34 53
257
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Restrain All Children
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
6
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(5)
(7)
(10)
(2)
(2)
(9)
(11)
(4)
(3)
(12)
(1)
(9)
(8)
(6)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(12) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
25
28
30
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page .
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open monitor on
the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the tailgate is
not tightly closed.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
and tailgate open monitor works.
34 53
63
82
84
CONTINUED
Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).78
94
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
94
97
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
The seat belt in the center position
of the back seat can be unlatched
and retracted to allow the back seat
to be folded up or down. This seat
belt should be latched whenever the
seat-back is in an upright position.
See page for how to unlatch and
relatch the seat belt.
104
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
14
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
18
CONTINUED
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
RELEASE BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any objects, such as a folded-down
back seat, that are touching the
rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
27 28
Seat Belt System Components
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
18
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating position on the rear seat is
equipped with a detachable seat belt
that has two parts: a small latch plate
and an anchor buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page .
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
14
104
46
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
DETACHABLE SEAT BELT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
).
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
30
283
do not deploy
Honda
Warranty Information
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
20
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly,
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
22
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(12)
(8)
(11)
(10)
(7)
(13)
(9)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensor Unit/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) SRS Indicator
(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
25
28
30
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
(14) (16)
(15)
(14) Front Crash Sensors
(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)
(16) Side Curtain Airbags
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and a front
passenger’s seat belt is latched or
unlatched (see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
27
20
29
27
18
31
31
32
30
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
Main Menu
Table of Contents
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
27
CONTINUED
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
CONTINUED
Advanced Airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
32
How Your Side Airbags Work
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if sensors in
the seat detect a child has leaned
into the side airbag’s deployment
path, the airbag will shut off.
31
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
In a Side Impact
In a Rollover
Additional Information About Your Airbags
30
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’tcome
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
61
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the SRS Indicator Works
not
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
U.S. Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object, such as a folded-down
back seat, that is touching the rear
of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
Additional Information About Your Airbags
32
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
Canada
U.S.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not remove or modify a f ront
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
Additional Safety Precautions
Airbag Service
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children aged 12 and
under.
39 49
50 53
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
34
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
31
50
CONTINUED
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Small Children
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
36
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
15
14
50
94
CONTINUED
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Additional Safety PrecautionsIf You Must Drive with Several
Children
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).88
46 47
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
38
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Child Seat Type
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Protecting Infants
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
40
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page ).
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into each rear seating
position in the back seat.
32
44
CONTINUED
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
1.
2.
Selecting a Child Seat
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Installing a Child Seat
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
42
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the rear seats to
secure a child seat in any seating
position: one in each outer seating
position, or one in the center.
Thefiveloweranchorsarelocated
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
When you install a child seat in the
rear center seating position, use the
center lower anchors as shown in the
illustration. To install a child seat in
either outer seating position, use the
outer lower anchors. You can install
up to two child seats at a time using
the outer lower anchors.
Do not attach two child seat
connectors to a single lower anchor
at a time.
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Store the seat belt buckle or
tongue in the storage pockets.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in either of the rear outer seats:
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Using the Outer LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
LOWER ANCHORS FOR OUTER LATCH
BUTTON
LOWER ANCHORS FOR
CENTER LATCH
OUTER LOWER ANCHORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats have
a rigid-type connector as shown
above.
Other LATCH-compatible seats have
a flexible-type connector as shown
above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Remove the head restraint (see
page ). Make sure the removed
head restraint is secured in the
cargo area.
Reinstall the head restraint when the
child seat is removed.
Remove the dual deck cargo shelf
(see page ).
5.
4.
3.
6.
97
111
If equipped
Installing a Child Seat
44
Flexible typeRigid type
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow step 1 through 5 as
described previously to secure the
child seat.
Pull down the cover to access the
tether anchor.
Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the tether anchor in
the ceiling, making sure the strap
is not twisted. Tighten the strap
according to the seat maker’s
instructions.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the rear center seating
position, use the center lower
anchorsasshownabove.
Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the tether strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Using the Center LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER ANCHOR
CENTER LOWER ANCHORS
COVER
TETHER ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
rear seat, make sure the detachable
seat belt anchor is securely latched
(see page ).
2.1.
3.
104
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
46
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.
Each rear outside seating position
has an anchorage point on the seat-
back, and the center seating position
has an anchorage point in the ceiling
near the tailgate.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf.
On vehicles with the dual deck
cargoshelf,removeit(seepage
).
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), remove the
head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the seat-back.
Make sure to store the removed
head restraint in the cargo area
and to reinstall it when the child
seat is removed.
1. 3.
2. 4.
5.
46
111
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Anchor
Installing a Child Seat
48
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the tether strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), open the
anchor cover.
Remove the rear center head
restraint, and store it in the cargo
area.
1.
2.
3.
4.46
Using the Center Anchor
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
TETHER STRAP HOOK
COVER
TETHER ANCHOR
TETHER ANCHOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
50
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
3.
4.
5.
41
CONTINUED
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
14 50
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Larger Children
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
With the tailgate open, airflow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
54
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models only
Canadian models
U.S. models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
SUN VISOR
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊Symbols on labels
attached to your vehicle are to
remind you to read this owner’s
manual for proper and safe
operation of your vehicle.
Canadian modelsU.S. models
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models
Canadian models
Safety Labels
56
HOOD
DOORJAMBS
DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 58
............................Instrument Panel . 59
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60
.............................................Gauges . 66
...................................Trip Meter . 67
.................Current Fuel Mileage . 68
................Average Fuel Mileage . 68
...........................................Range . 68
.....................................Odometer . 69
..................................Fuel Gauge . 69
...................Temperature Gauge . 69
Outside Temperature
..................................Indicator . 69
..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 71
..................Maintenance Minder . 71
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 72
.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 73
.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 74
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75
.................Hazard Warning Button . 76
.................Rear Window Defogger . 77
.................................Parking Brake . 78
........Steering Wheel Adjustments . 78
...............................Keys and Locks . 79
........................Immobilizer System . 80
................................Ignition Switch . 81
......................................Door Locks . 82
......................Power Door Locks . 82
.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 84
..............Childproof Door Locks . 88
.......................Remote Transmitter . 89
............................................Tailgate . 92
.................................................Seats . 94
..................................Seat Heaters . 105
............................Power Windows . 106
.......................................Moonroof . 107
...........................................Mirrors . 108
.........Interior Convenience Items . 110
............Dual Deck Cargo Shelf . 111
.....................Beverage Holders . 113
.............................Center Table . 114
......................Lower Glove Box . 114
......................Upper Glove Box . 115
............................Vanity Mirror . 115
...................................Sun Visor . 116
....................Sunglasses Holder . 116
................Conversation Mirror . 117
........Accessory Power Sockets . 117
.............Console Compartment . 118
..................................Coat Hook . 119
.......................Seat Under Tray . 119
...............................Interior Lights . 119
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
57
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
Control Locations
58
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
MIRROR CONTROLS
GAUGES
AUDIO SYSTEM
CLOCK
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
MOONROOF SWITCH
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
EX-L without navigation system is shown
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
(P.59)
(P.66)
(P.109)
(P.82)
(P.106)
(P.215)
(P.217)
(P.78)
(P.117)
(P.105)
(P.124)
(P.231)
(P.206)
(P.129)
(P.76)
(P.32)
(P.107)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
59
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
TPMS
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE
AND BRAKE
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
DOOR AND
TAILGATE
OPEN
MONITOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
SECURITY
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.65)
(P.62)
(P.64)
(P.310)
(P.63)
(P.63)
(P.60, 309)
(P.60, 311)
(P.60, 309)
(P.63)
(P.61)
(P.64)
(P.64)
(P.61)
(P.61)
(P.60)
(P.62)
(P.61)
(P.63)
(P.62)
(P.62)
(P.65, 207)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The instrument panel has many
indicators that give you important
information about your vehicle.
See page .
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
This indicator has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
notfastenyourseatbeltbeforethe
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
2.
1.
310
309
309
311
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
60
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page .
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, automatic seat belt
tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled. (see page ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the ABS.
If this happens, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer. With the
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-
lock. For more information, see page
.
31
31
18
80
238
Instrument Panel Indicators
Side Airbag Off Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Instruments and Controls
61
CanadaU.S.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. See page for more
information on the VSA system.
1.
2.
3.
209
209
240
240
240
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator Cruise Control Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
If this indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position and release the parking
brake, it means there is a problem
withtheDRL.Theremayalsobea
problem with the high beam
headlights. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 2.3 US gal (8.6
)offuel
remaining in the tank before the
reading reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the reading does reach E.
The appropriate indicator comes on
in this display if the tailgate or any
door is not closed tightly.
279
75
75
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Indicators
High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
63
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition to the ON (II) position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). Refer to page
for more information.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
298
317
242
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Lights On Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
64
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian models only
If equipped
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page ).
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
remindsyouthatitistimetotake
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
272
257
207
Washer Level Indicator Security System IndicatorMaintenance Minder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
65
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
66
SELECT/RESET KNOB
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGEFUEL GAUGE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
TRIP METER
CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE
ODOMETER/AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE/
CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
The information display consists of
threesegments.Theuppersegment
displays current fuel mileage, the
second segment displays the
odometer, average fuel mileage,
range (estimated distance), engine
oil life, and the lower segment
displays the trip meter, and
maintenance item code(s).
To switch the display, press and
release the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position the last selection is
displayed.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the Select/
Reset knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the meter you
last selected is displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
Trip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This display shows the current, or
instant fuel mileage you are getting.
When either of the trip meters (trip
A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s
average fuel mileage since you last
resetthattripmetercanbeshown
on the information display (mpg on
U.S. models and l/100 km on
Canadian models). This number is
updated once per 10 seconds. To see
the average fuel mileage, press and
release the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly.
When you reset a trip meter, the
average fuel mileage for that trip
meter also resets.
This display shows the estimated
distance you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
This distance is estimated from the
fuel economy you have achieved
over the last few miles (kilometers),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic condition, etc.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).
Current Fuel Mileage Average Fuel Mileage Range (Estimated Distance)
Gauges
68
U.S. model is shown
Current Fuel Mileage
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models).
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the reading should be in
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the reading may reach near
the red mark. If it reaches the red
(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. See page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
307
If equipped
CONTINUED
Outside Temperature IndicatorTemperature GaugeOdometer
Fuel Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
69
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
±±
−−−−−
−−−
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
To adjust the outside temperature
display, press and hold the Select/
Reset knob for 10 seconds. The
display changes as shown above.
Select the outside temperature
indicator by turning the Select/Reset
knob. The display begins to blink,
pushthesameknobtoenterthis
setting, then turn it to adjust the
temperature. The following
sequence will appear for each: 0, 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.)
or 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
push the Select/Reset knob to enter
the setting. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
Gauges
70
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the information
display after you start the engine.
For more information, see page .
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
216
257
Gauges
Maintenance MinderCheck Fuel Cap Message
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
Refer to the navigation system manual.
1:
2:
3:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
72
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM ON/OFF
SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
SHIFT LEVER
MIRROR CONTROL
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTON
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.74)
(P.241)
(P.109)
(P.203)
(P.78)
(P.209)
(P.117)
(P.77)
(P.231)
(P.76)
(P.32)
(P.73)
(P.75)
VOICE CONTROLS
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL (P.78)
HORN
2
3
1
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
The wipers operate every
few seconds. At low speed and high
speed, the wipers run continuously.
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to
the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wipers change
to low speed when the vehicle
speed exceeds 12 mph (20km/h).
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On all models except LX
Windshield Wiper MIST
OFF
INT
LO
HI
Windshield Washers
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Instruments and Controls
73
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn Signal
OFF
Parking and interior lights
Headlights on
High Beams
Flashhighbeams
Rotate the switch
counterclockwise also to spray the
window washer and turn the wiper
on.
Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.
Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing two
sweeps.
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
OFF
Therearwindowwasherusesthe
same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.
3.
1.
2.
Turn Signal and HeadlightsRear Window Wiper and Washer
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
74
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turning the switch to
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate light.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.
You can change the instrument panel
brightness only when the light
switch is on.
Push the lever
forward and the high beam indicator
will come on (see page ). Pull it
back to return to low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
With the headlight switch in the off
or position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Turntheknobonthelowerpartof
the instrument panel to adjust the
brightness.
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
63
CONTINUED
Turn Signal
Headlights
Instrument Panel BrightnessHigh Beams
Daytime Running Lights
Turn Signal and Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
75
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To reduce glare at night, the instru-
ment panel illumination dims when
you turn the light switch to or
. Turning the Select/Reset
knob fully to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced bright-
ness.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
Hazard Warning Button
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
76
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page .109
If equipped
Rear Window Defogger
Rear Window Defogger
Instruments and Controls
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page ).
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
1.
2.
60
Parking Brake Steering Wheel Adjustments
Parking Brake, Steering Wheel Adjustment
78
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
boxlockedwhenyouleaveyour
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
3.
4.
Keys and Locks
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
79
LEVER
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET
KEY
(Gray)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start your engine, contact your
dealer.
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
80
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
ON (II)
ACCESSORY (I)
START (III)
LOCK (0)
Ignition Switch
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To lock all doors and the tailgate,
push the front of the master door
lock switch on either front door,
pull the locktabrearwardonthe
drivers door, or use the key on the
outside lock on the drivers door.
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door lock. To
unlock only the driver’s door, insert
the key, turn the key, and release it.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
Pushing the rear of the either
master door lock switch will unlock
all doors and the tailgate. Pushing
forwardthelocktabonthedrivers
doors unlocks only that door.
The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
seetheredindicatoronthelocktab
above the inner door handle.
Power Door Locks
Door Locks
82
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Unlock
Lock
RED INDICATOR
Lock
Unlock
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
locktabrearwardorpushthetopof
the master switch, then close the
door.
With any door and the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, locking
with master door lock switches is
disabled. The lock tab on the driver’s
door is not disabled if the driver’s
door is closed. Pulling the driver’s
lock tab rearward will lock all doors
and the tailgate. If you try to lock an
open driver’s door by pulling the lock
tab rearward, the lock tab on the
driver’s door pops out and unlocks
the driver’s door.
Lockout Prevention
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
83
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
Release the switch and then,
within 5 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and the
tailgate to automatically lock and
unlock. Make all settings before you
start driving.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Set the parking brake.
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
Thedoorsandthetailgatelock
when the vehicle speed reaches
9mph(15km/h).
This is the factory setting.
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
Thedoorsandthetailgatelock
whenever you move the shift lever
out of the Park position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
shift lever is moved out of park (P).
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Auto Door Locking
To activate an auto door lock mode:
Door Locks
84
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and open the driver’s
door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Set the parking brake.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Set the parking brake.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound after about 5
seconds.
Release the switch and then,
within 5 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
1.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
vehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph
(15 km/h).
CONTINUED
To turn the auto door lock modes
off:
To activate an auto door lock mode:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Release the switch and then,
within 5 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
Park (P).
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to the
Park position.
This is the factory setting.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
All doors and the tailgate unlock
when you move the shift lever to
the Park position.
All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
Set the parking brake.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
Unlocks driver’s door when the ignition
switch is moved out of the ON (II)
position.
Auto Door Unlocking
To activate an auto door unlock
mode:
Door Locks
86
Move the shift lever to the
PARK (P) position, then turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
7.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
Park (P).
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. Continue to hold
down the switch:
Set the parking brake.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and open the driver’s
door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound.
Until you hear one click (after
about 5 seconds) to activate the
driver’s door unlock feature.
Or, until you hear a second click
(after about 10 seconds) to
activate the all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
4. 4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
To turn the auto door unlock modes
off:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
87
Release the switch and then,
within 5 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
6.
Move the shift lever to the
PARK (P) position, then turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
7.
Release the switch and then,
within 5 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
5.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and the tailgate when the shift lever is
moved to Park (P).
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. Continue to hold
down the switch:
Until you hear one click (after
about 5 seconds) to activate the
driver’s door unlock feature.
Or, until you hear a second click
(after about 10 seconds) to
activate the all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
fromtheinsideregardlessofthe
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Childproof Door Locks
To activate an auto door unlock
mode:
Door Locks
88
LEVER
Lock
Unlock
Release the switch and then,
within 5 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate. Some exterior lights
will flash twice each time you press
the button.
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
arelockedandthesecuritysystem
(if equipped) has set. You cannot
lockthedoorsandthetailgateifany
door or the tailgate is not fully closed
or the key is in the ignition switch.
The ceiling light and the spot light (if
equipped) comes on when you press
the UNLOCK button if the lights are
in the door activated position. If you
do not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, the light fades out.
If you relock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
light(s) will go off immediately.
If you do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock, and the
security system (if equipped) will
reset.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
CONTINUED
UNLOCK
LOCK
PANIC
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
89
LED
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
1.
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
90
SCREW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
Install the parts in reverse order.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
5.
2.
3.
4.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
91
BATTERY
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the tailgate, push the
release, and lift up. To close the
tailgate, use the tailgate handle to
lower it, then press down on the
back edge.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
on page
.
The tailgate will lock when you lock
the driver’s door with the key, the
remote transmitter, the master door
lock switch, or the lock tab on the
driver’s door.
To unlock the tailgate, turn the key
clockwise twice, push the rear of the
master door lock switch, or push the
UNLOCK twice on the remote
transmitter.
54
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Tailgate
92
HANDLE
RELEASE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Push the release lever to the lower
right as shown.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Place a cloth on the upper of the
cover, then use a small flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the cover on
the back of the tailgate.
Unlocking the Tailgate
Tailgate
Instruments and Controls
93
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
11 13
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the front or rear seat
forward and backward, pull up on the
bar under the seat cushion’s front
edge. Move the seat to the desired
position, and release the lever. Try to
movetheseattomakesureitis
locked in position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
The angle of each rear seat-back can
be adjusted separately. To change
the seat-back angle of the rear seat-
back, pull up on the release lever on
the top of the seat-back. Move the
seat-back to the desired position,
then release the lever. Make sure
the seat-back latches in the new
position.
Seat Adjustments
Seats
94
FRONT SEAT
REAR SEAT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When using the center seating
position, adjust the left and right side
of the rear seats to the same position.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
backs after you adjust the rear seats.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
Each front seat has an armrest on
thesideoftheseat-back.Touseit,
pivotitdown.
CONTINUED
Seats
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Armrests
Instruments and Controls
95
FRONT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.
The rear center seat-back has an
armrest. To use it, fold it down. To
use the cargo area pass-through, pull
up the release on top of the center
seat-back and fold it down.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
dual deck cargo shelf, do not use the
shelf when any seat-back is folded
down. Objects placed on this shelf
canbethrownforwardand
occupants can be injured during
sudden stops or a collision.
For more information of the dual
deck cargo shelf, see page .111
Seats
Rear Armrest/Cargo Pass-
through
96
REAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
13
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
Theyaremosteffectivewhenyou
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
To remove a head restraint, pull it up
as far as it will go. Push the release
button, then pull the restraint out of
the seat-back.
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
97
FRONT POSITION RELEASE BUTTON
REAR OUTER
POSITION
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can recline the seat-backs on the
front seats so they are level with the
rear seat cushions, making a large
cushioned area. To do this:
Adjust the rear seats as far back
as possible.
Remove the front head restraints
(see page ), and store them
securely.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly adjusted.
1.
2.
97
Reclining the Front Seats
Seats
98
REAR CENTER RELEASE BUTTON
SLIDE BAR
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the front seats forward as
far as possible. Pull up the seat-
back angle adjustment lever and
pivot the seat-back backward until
it is level with the rear seat
cushion.
Adjust the rear seat-back to the
desired position.
Reverse this procedure to return the
front and rear seats to the upright
position. Make sure you install the
head restraints and securely lock the
seats before driving.
When you return the seat-back to its
upright position, hold the seat-back
to keep it from going up too quickly.
Each rear seat-back can be folded
down separately to give more cargo
room. With either of the outer seat-
backs folded-down, you can still
carry a passenger in the rear seat.
With the center seat-back folded-
down, either outer seating position
can be used.
Push the seat belt buckles into the
seat cushion.
You can also fold up the left or right
side of the rear seats separately to
create further cargo space (see page
).
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back.
3.
4.
1.102
CONTINUED
Folding the Rear Seats Down
Seats
Instruments and Controls
99
BUCKLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fold the seat-back forward.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
When you are folding the rear center
seat-back, use the latch plate to
release the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into the
holder on the ceiling and store the
buckles in it.
Make sure the rear seat armrest is
stored.
Lower the rear head restraints to
its lowest position.
Pull up the release lever on the top
of the seat-back.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat-back to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is secured and
the seat belt in front of the seat-back
before driving.
In the rear center seating position,
be sure the detachable anchor is
latched securely (see page ).
2.
3.
4.
104
104
Seats
100
LATCH PLATE
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure that the folded down rear
seat does not interfere with the front
passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors and the front passenger’s
seat belt reminder indicator to work
improperly (see pages and ).
Also check the passenger airbag off
indicator to assure proper operation
of the passenger’s front airbag.
When any seat-back is folded down,
do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
(if equipped).
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
The left and right rear seats can be
folded up separately to make room
for cargo.
Remove any items from the seat
beforeyoufolduptheseatcushion.
To fold the rear seat forward:
Pull up the bar under the seat
cushion and slide the rear seat
backward. The rear seat will not
fold forward unless it is not as far
back as it will go.
27 31
222
1.
CONTINUED
Seats
Carrying Cargo
Folding the Rear Seat Forward
Instruments and Controls
101
SLIDE BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Followsteps1through4onpage
for folding down the seat-
back.
Lower the center seat-back before
folding the passenger’s side seat
forward.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release strap
under the seat cushion’s back
edge, then lift the rear of the seat.
You cannot fold up the rear seat if
it is not latched securely in the
rearmost position.
Pull out the fastening strap from
the slit on the seat-back. Then
attach the anchor on the fastening
strap to the hook on the center
pillar.
2.
3.
99
4.
Seats
102
LOCK RELEASE STRAP
ANCHOR
HOOK
FASTENING
STRAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull down on the anchor to engage
the upper part of the anchor
securely on the hook, and make
sure the seat is secure.
Make sure that the folded up right
rear seat does not interfere with the
front passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors and the front passenger’s
seat belt reminder indicator to work
improperly (see page ). Also
check the passenger airbag off
indicator to assure proper operation
of the passenger’s advanced front
airbag.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
When you are not using the
fastening strap, store the strap into
the slit on the seat-back.
Make sure both outer seat belts are
positioned in side of the rear seat-
backs.
In the center seating position of the
rear seat, be sure the detachable
anchor is latched securely before
using the seat belt (see page ).
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
(if equipped) when the seats are
folded down or forward.
5.
104
222
32
Seats
Carrying Cargo
Instruments and Controls
103
HOOK
ANCHORFASTENING STRAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable anchor.
Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
This allows the center seat belt to be
unlatched when the rear center seat
back is folded down or the right side
rear seat is folded forward.
Detachable Anchor
Seats
104
TRIANGLE
MARKS
ANCHOR BUCKLE
SMALL LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE
Using a seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat is
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag cut off
system. The ignition switch must be
in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters. Push the top of the switch,
HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After
the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
If equipped
Seat Heaters
Seats, Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
105
ANCHOR BUCKLE
LATCH PLATE
DRIVER’S SEAT
HEATER SWITCH
PASSENGER’S
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go up
or down all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
window. To close the window, pull
back on the switch and hold it.
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
AUTO
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
106
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− To open the moonroof
fully, pull back the moonroof switch
firmly, then release it. The moonroof
automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
To open or close the moonroof
partially, lightly pull the switch back
or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To open the moonroof, pull back on
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, push the switch forward
andholdit.Releasetheswitchto
stop the operation.
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch on
the front ceiling to operate the
moonroof. You must turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof.
If equipped
CONTINUED
AUTO
Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
107
TILT
CLOSE
OPEN
MOONROOF SWITCH
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If the
moonroof runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction and then stop.
To close the moonroof, remove the
obstacle, then use the moonroof
switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position for the moonroof to
operate.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
AUTO REVERSE Mirrors
Moonroof, Mirrors
108
TAB
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
2.
1.
3.
4.
If equipped
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Power Mirror Heaters
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
109
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Interior Convenience Items
110
COAT HOOK DOOR BEVERAGE HOLDER
SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
UPPER GLOVE BOX
LOWER GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
CENTER CONSOLE with
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
BEVERAGE HOLDERS in
REAR SEAT ARMREST
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
CONVERSATION MIRROR
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SEAT UNDER TRAY
DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
1
2
3
If equipped
On some models, this is on the center table
This is on the center table or on the front panel, depending on models
2
2
1
1
3
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The dual deck cargo shelf will
separate the storage area into two
storage areas. On the upper area,
you can store small and light items.
Youshouldplaceheavyitemsinthe
lower storage area. You can remove
the dual deck cargo shelf and store it
on the cargo floor to make a larger
cargo area.
To store the dual deck cargo shelf,
lift up either side of it, then move it
as shown above.
Make sure to use the dual deck
cargo shelf fully opened and securely
latched.
To remove the dual deck cargo shelf,
fold up the rear half of the shelf
forward onto the front half, push up
on both sides, then pull it toward you.
Place the dual deck cargo shelf on
the far side of the cargo floor, then
slide it forward while folding out the
upperhalfoftheshelf.
If equipped
CONTINUED
Interior Convenience Items
Dual Deck Cargo Shelf
Instruments and Controls
111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The dual deck cargo shelf can be
placed on the floor as shown above.
Reverse this procedure to return the
dual deck cargo shelf to the upper
position. Make sure the dual deck
cargo shelf is latched securely.
The maximum load on the dual deck
cargo shelf is 20 lbs on U.S. models,
and10kgoncanadianmodels.This
isshownonalabelonthedriver’s
side of the dual deck cargo shelf
(see page ). To prevent damage
to the dual deck cargo shelf, do not
exceed the maximum load.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
When any of the rear seats is folded
down or forward, do not place any
objects on the dual deck cargo shelf.
Make sure to store the shelf on the
cargo area floor. It could be
unlatched during a crash.
56
222
Interior Convenience Items
Carrying Cargo
112
Do not use this shelf if the
second row seats are folded
down.
Objects placed on the shelf
could be thrown forward during
a crash or sudden stop and hurt
someone.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
On vehicles with rear seat armrest
On Canadian models
On U.S. models
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 20 lbs (9 kg) on this shelf.
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 10 kg on this shelf.
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Instruments and Controls
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the lower glove box by pulling
the bottom of the handle. Close it
with a firm push. Lock or unlock the
glove box with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Sitting on or getting under the table,
or putting heavy objects on the table,
may damage or deform it.
Do not put any items on the table
while driving. They may fall down or
fly around when you go around
corners or brake hard.
To use the center table, pull up the
outside edge of the table until it
latches. To store it, pull the lever and
lower the table.
On LX and EX models
Interior Convenience Items
Lower Glove BoxCenter Table
114
To lock
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
Open the upper glove box by
pushing up the lever. Close it by
pulling down on the edge under the
lever.
Interior Convenience Items
Vanity MirrorUpper Glove Box
Instruments and Controls
115
EDGE
LEVER
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the raised detent. It will unlatch
and swing down. To close it, push it
until it latches. Make sure the holder
is closed while you are driving.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Interior Convenience Items
Sunglasses HolderSun Visor
116
Push
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
SUN VISOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Your vehicle has two or three
accessory power sockets depending
on the model.
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
To switch back to the sunglasses
holder, close the conversation mirror
and then open the sunglasses holder.
Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power SocketsConversation Mirror
Instruments and Controls
117
FRONT
EX model
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If equipped
Push the release knob to open or
close the console compartment, slide
the lid rearward.
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects getting into the
socket.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment
118
Push
REAR
EX-L model
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or remote transmitter.
Your vehicle has a seat under tray
located under the front passenger
seat. Use the tray by pulling on the
front center edge of the tray.
Touseacoathook,slideitout
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is folded up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
If equipped
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
Ceiling LightSeat Under TrayCoat Hook
Instruments and Controls
119
ON
OFF
DOOR ACTIVATED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on the spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
The spotlights have a two-position
switch. In the DOOR position, the
lights come on when you open any
door. In the OFF position, the lights
do not come on.
The spotlights (with the switch in
the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch.
After all doors and the tailgate are
closed tightly, the light fades out in
about 30 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door and
the tailgate, the light fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave any door or the tailgate
open without the key in the ignition
switch, the ceiling light goes off after
3 minutes.
Interior Lights
Spotlights
120
Push
Push
EX, EX-L models
LX model
Push
Push
Courtesy light
Courtesy light
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo area light has a three-
position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.
The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door. It
fades out in about 30 seconds after
the door is closed.
Interior Lights
Cargo Area LightCourtesy Light
Ignition Switch Light
Instruments and Controls
121
OFF
ON
TAILGATE ACTIVATED
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 124
................................Audio System . 129
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 131
.................................Playing a Disc .135
........Disc Player Error Messages .142
...........Playing the AM/FM Radio .143
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 147
..................................Playing Discs .152
........Disc Player Error Messages .159
...........Playing the AM/FM Radio .160
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 166
..................................Playing a disc .172
....................................CD Changer .181
...........................Playing a PC card .188
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 200
..................Protecting Your Discs . 202
................Remote Audio Controls . 203
.................Radio Theft Protection . 205
..........................Setting the Clock . 206
............................Security System . 207
...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 208
...............................Cruise Control . 209
LX model
EX and EX-L models without navigation
system
EX-L Models with navigation system
Features
Features
123
Main Menu
＊
＊ : EX-L model and All Canadian models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
124
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
FAN CONTROL DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRRORS BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
On some models, this button also
operates the heated outside mirrors
(see page ).
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicatorinthebuttonisonwhen
the A/C is on.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the , A/C,
or any of mode buttons cancels MAX
A/C.
77
109
CONTINUED
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Rear Window Defogger ButtonRecirculation Button
Mode Control
MAX A/C Button
Features
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode from
or to , the system
keeps the A/C on. The A/C
indicator will not come on if it was
off to start with.
To turn off the A/C, press the A/C
button to illuminate the indicator,
then press it again to turn off the
A/C.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
You cannot turn the A/C off in this
mode.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select .
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode
from or , the system
also automatically turns on the
A/C. This helps prevent the
windows from fogging up
unintendedly. The A/C indicator
willnotcomeonifitwasoffto
start with (see the first column on
this page).
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
When you switch to or
mode from , the A/C
turnsoff.Butifitwasontostart
with, the A/C stays on.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then discharges
it through vents near the tailgate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Ventilation
Using the Heater
126
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects , and
switches to recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Turn the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
69
If the interior is very warm,
Dehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
When you switch to , from
or , the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
buttoncomesonandthengoesoff.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator does not come
on if it was off to start with.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was off to start with.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select / to help
clear the rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Defog and Defrost To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Vents, Heating, and A/C
128
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
For LX, models, see pages
through .
For EX and EX-L models without
navigation system, see pages
through .
For EX-L model with navigation
system, see pages through .
131 142
143 159
160 199
CONTINUED
Audio System
Features
129
LX model
U.S. EX-L model without
navigation system
U.S. EX and Canadian EX, EX-L models
without navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
130
U.S. EX-L model with navigation system Canadian EX-L model with navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
Features
131
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
TUNE KNOBPOWER/
VOLUME KNOB
U.S. and Canadian LX models
SEEK/SKIP BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune a
higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune a lower frequency.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the right side of the A. SEL/SCAN
bar, then release it. You will see
SCAN in the display. The system will
scan for a station with a strong signal.
When it finds one, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the bar again.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
To Select a Station
TUNE
To Play the AM/FM Radio SCAN
SEEK/SKIP
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
132
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
,pressthe
A. SEL side of the bar. This restores
the presets you originally set.
Press the left side of the
A. SEL/SCAN bar. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
Pick a preset button (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
1.
2.
3.
4.
200
To turn off auto select
AUTO SELECTPreset
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
Features
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
Except SVC adjustment
75
Adjusting the Sound
BASS
TREBLE
BALANCE
FADER
SVC
Audio System Lighting
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
134
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Features
135
REPEAT BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
CD/AUX
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
U.S. and Canadian LX model
LOAD
INDICATOR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD/
AUX button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
To load or play disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
To Play a Disc
Playing a Disc (LX model)
136
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
intherestofthewaytoplayit.You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
showninthedisplay.Whenplayinga
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Text Data Display FunctionTo Load a Disc
Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＞
Each time you
press and release the side of
the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA mode).
Press and release the side, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
The display shows up to about 10
characters of selected text data (the
foldername,filename,etc.).Ifthe
text data has more than 10
characters, you will see the first 9
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 10 characters
are shown.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SEEK/SKIP
Playing a Disc (LX model)
138
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−−To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
theknobtotherighttoskiptothe
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM button
for 2 seconds to return to normal
play.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT button twice.
You will hear a beep and see F-RPT
in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder with
the TUNE knob also turns off the
repeat feature.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal playing.
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
CONTINUED
FOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)FOLDER-REPEAT
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN bar twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, selecting a different folder
with the TUNE knob, or pressing the
SCAN bar, also turns off the folder
scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN bar, the mode changes from
scan to folder scan, then to normal
playing.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN bar. You will see
SCAN in the display. You will get a
10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button for about 2 seconds to
get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar also turns off the scan
feature.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM button 2 times. You
will hear a beep and see F-RDM in
the display. The system will then
select and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random by pressing and holding the
RDM button again, or by selecting a
different folder with the TUNE knob.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.
Playing a Disc (LX model)
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
FOLDER-RANDOM
140
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD/AUX button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD/AUX button again to
switch back to the disc player.
202
Protecting Discs
To Stop Playing a Disc
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause SolutionError
Message
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Current track will skipped. The next supported
track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt.
Insert the disc again. If the code does not
disappear, or the disc cannot be removed,
consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc
out of the player.
Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)
142
UNSUPPORT
FORMAT
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Features
143
SCAN
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
U.S. EX and Canadian EX and EX-L models
U.S. EX-L
SEEK BAR
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune a
higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune a lower frequency.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
To Select a Station
TUNE
SCANTo Play the AM/FM Radio
SEEK
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
144
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Pick a preset button (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
1.
2.
3.
4.
200
To turn off auto select,
AUTO SELECTPreset
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
SUBWOOFER (if equipped), and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
75
If equipped
Adjusting the Sound
BASS
TREBLE
BALANCE
SUBWOOFER
FADER
SVC
Audio System Lighting
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
146
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Playing the XM
Satellite Radio
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model)
Features
On U.S. EX-L
147
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
DISPLAY MODE BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
XM RADIO BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar ( or ) to select another
category.
Operating the XM Radio
TUNE
MODE
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model)
148
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM button again. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button to
tune to it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
SCAN XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
Preset
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model)
Features
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model)
150
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system and press the XM
RADIO button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press TUNE until
‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D.
will appear in the display.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model)
Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Disc
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
152
TUNE KNOB
DISPLAY
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
U.S. EX and Canadian EX and EX-L models
EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
LOAD INDICATOR
CD/AUX
BUTTON
DISPLAY
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
U.S. EX-L model
SEEK/SKIP BAR
RANDOM BUTTON
LOAD
INDICATOR
DISC SLOT
REPEAT
BUTTON
DISC SLOT
LOAD
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD button (CD/AUX button on
models with satellite radio), the disc
and track numbers are displayed.
The system will continuously play a
disc until you change modes.
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
To Play a Disc
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Features
153
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holdsuptosixdiscs.
Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in
the display.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
The disc number for an empty
position is highlighted and the red
disc load indicator starts blinking.
Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It plays the disc just
loaded.
1.
2.
1.
3.
4.
5.
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Loading Discs in the In-dash Disc
Changer
154
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＞
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
foldername,filename,etc.).Ifthe
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1 6). If
youselectanemptypositioninthe
disc changer, the system will try to
load the disc in the next available
slot.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
Each time you
press and release the side of
the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA mode).
Press and release the side, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SEEK/SKIP
Features
155
NOTE: With the optional CD changer,
use the preset buttons (5 or 6) to select
a different disc. Press and release the
preset 5 (DISC ) button to select the
previous disc or preset 6 (DISC
) to
select the next disc in sequence.
−
−
−
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
theknobtotherighttoskiptothe
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and release the RPT
button repeatedly until you see F-
RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder.PressandholdtheRPT
button for 2 seconds to turn it off.
Selecting a different folder with the
TUNE knob also turns off the repeat
feature.
You will hear a beep.
To continuously
replay the current disc, press and
release the RPT button repeatedly
until you see D-RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds again to turn it off.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, to disc
repeat then to normal playing.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files within
a disc in MP3 or WMA mode) in
random order. To activate random
play, press and release the RDM
button. In MP3 or WMA mode, press
the RDM button repeatedly to select
RDM (within a disc random play).
You will see RDM in the display.
PresstheRDMbuttonfor2seconds
to return to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press and release the RDM button
seeF-RDMinthedisplay.The
system will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
andholdtheRDMbuttonfor2
seconds, or by selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob.
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER-REPEAT
DISC-REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
FOLDER-RANDOM
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
156
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob also
turns off the scan feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan to folder scan, disc scan
then to normal playing.
This function
samples each first track of all the
discs in the in-dash disc changer in
the order they are stored. To
activate disc scan, press the SCAN
button repeatedly until you will see
D-SCAN in the display. The system
will then play the first track/file of
the first disc for approximately 10
seconds. After playing the first track
/file of the last disc, the system plays
normally.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press the
SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA
mode, press the SCAN button
repeatedly to select SCAN. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a10secondsamplingofeachtrack/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode and play the last track/file
sampled.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar also turns off the scan
feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)
DISC-SCAN
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
Features
157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject ( ) button. When
a disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM or satellite radio ). The disc will
reload into the system and will
remainthereinapausemode.
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
Press the AM, FM, AUX button, or
CD/AUX, XM button to switch to
the radio or satellite radio (U.S.
models), while a disc is playing.
Press the CD button again to play
the disc.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
:OnU.S.EX-Lmodel
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
To Stop Playing a Disc
158
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Solution
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
CauseError
Message
Current track will skipped. The next supported
track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt.
Insert the disc again. If the code does not
disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed,
consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc
out of the player.
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Disc Player Error Messages (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Features
159
UNSUPPORTED
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
160
U.S. EX-L model
Canadian EX-L model
AUTO SELECT ICON
SOUND ICON
PRESET BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
FM1 ICON AM ICON
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
BACK GROUND ICON
AUTO SELECT ICON
FM1 ICON
AM ICON
FM2 ICON SOUND ICON
BACK GROUND ICON
FM2
ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
▲▼
▲
▼
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
Press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear two
beeps to change the frequency
rapidly. Release the bar when the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the
navigation section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the
control buttons on the left side of the
screen. The status bar appears on
the bottom of the screen each time
you operate any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower of the screen.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last turned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button, or touch the desired band
icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , or XM
2 ). On the FM band, STEREO will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
For information on XM radio, see
page .
:OnU.S.EX-Lmodel
166
To Select a Station
TUNE
Voice Control System
To Play the AM/FM Radio
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
▲▼
−
Each preset button’s frequency is
shown on the bottom of the audio
display.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor10seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preset
SEEK
SCAN
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
162
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the AUDIO button to view the
audio control icons, then press the
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO
SEL flashing in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
press the
AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.200
To turn off auto select,
AUTO SELECT
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
You can adjust the sound on the
navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUNDicononthedisplay.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the L or R icon.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. To adjust the
sound strength, touch or
on each side of the adjustment
bar.
The right upper display shows you
the current setting of the sound
strength coming from each speaker.
The SVC mode
controls the volume based on vehicle
speed. The faster you go, the louder
the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.
Adjusts the treble. To
adjust the treble and bass, touch
or on each side of the
treble or bass adjustment bar. The
adjustment bar on the right lower
display shows you the current
setting.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound. To adjust the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR
icon.
Adjusting the Sound
BASS
BALANCE
SUBWOOFER
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation)
TREBLE
FADER
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
164
SOUND ICON
SPEAKER SETTING
BASS/TREBLE SETTING
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can select the background
screen to display the sound level.
There are three screen modes: level
(the sound level is shown with the
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the
sound level appears as ripples of
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
You can also select the icon with the
joystick. Move it up and down to
move the highlighting and scroll
through lists. Select the icon, then
move the joystick to left or right to
change the setting.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the control panel (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
75
Audio System Lighting
Screen Mode
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
165
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
166
TUNE BAR
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
CATEGORY
INDICATOR
AUDIO BUTTON
XM RADIO
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET CHANNEL
NUMBER
XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON
U.S. EX-L model
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Whenyoupressandholdthe
AUDIO button, the display also
shows all XM information.
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the CD/XM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
touch the MODE icon. In channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels. In category mode,
such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,
you can select all of the channels
within that category. Each time you
touch and release the MODE icon,
the display changes between the
channel mode and the category
mode.
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, disc, pc card, etc.,
by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display.
You can also operate the radio using
the control buttons on the left side of
the screen. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen each
time you press any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see the audio
information by touching the AUDIO
INFO icon on the lower of the screen.
Operating the XM Radio MODE
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
Features
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
▼
▲
Pick the preset button (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the button (icon) until you
hear a beep.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
To store a channel:
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using each preset
button or preset icons on the screen.
Each preset button or icon stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
for higher numbered channels
and for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.
Press and hold
either side of the TUNE bar
( or ) until you hear a beep
to select another category.
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button again.
1.
2.
3.
PresetTUNE
CATEGORY
SCAN
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
168
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it. Each preset
button’s channel is shown on the
bottom of the audio display.
The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
This channel has no
artist or title information at this time.
4.
5.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
‘‘NO INFO’’
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
Features
169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
170
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system and press the XM
RADIO button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
Features
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
172
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
AUDIO BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
OPEN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
CD ICON
TUNE BAR
U.S. EX-L model is shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays CD FORMAT, and then
skips to the next file.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Your vehicle also has the CD
changer and operate at with the
same in-dash disc player. (see page
)
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
You operate the in-dash disc player
with the same controls used for the
radio. To load or play discs, the
ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
This audio system can also play CD-
RsandCD-RWscompressedinMP3
or WMA formats. When playing a
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 255 folders and play up
to 999 tracks. If the disc has a
complex structure, it takes a while to
readthediscbeforethesystem
begins to play it.
181
To Play a Disc
(In-dash single player)
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
Features
173
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button on
the edge of the screen panel. Do not
use the folded screen as a tray. If
you put a cup, for example, on the
screen, the liquid inside the cup may
spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.
The in-dash disc player is behind the
navigation screen. To use the disc
player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the disc slot appears.
To Load a Disc
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
174
OPEN BUTTON
DISC SLOT
CLOSE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the disc player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD button. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
lower of the screen.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist
name are shown on the audio display.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
the folder number and name, the file
number and name, the artist name,
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.
You can also select an icon with the
joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
ENT on the top of the joystick to
select the icon.
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3 or
WMA mode). Each preset button’s
function is shown on the bottom of
the screen.
To move rapidly within
a track/file, press and hold
(preset 4) or (preset 3).
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
FF/REW
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
Features
175
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
U.S. EX-L is shown
PRESET BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
▲
▼
−
−
−
−To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
to the next folder, and the side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
This
feature plays the tracks/files within
a disc in random order. To activate
track random, press and release the
RDM button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order, rather than in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
random, press and hold the RDM
button. You will see FOLDER
RANDOM in the display. The
system then selects and plays files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
the RDM button again, or if you
select a different folder with the
TUNE bar.
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button
(preset 1). You will see TRACK
REPEAT in the display. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and hold the RPT
button (preset 1) for 2 seconds. You
will see FOLDER REPEAT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current folder. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
Selecting a different folder with the
TUNE bar also turns off folder
repeat.
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a disc/folder)
FOLDER RANDOM
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER REPEAT
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
176
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
CONTINUED
You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
display. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display, then touch
the Track List icon. The track list
menu appears on the display.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order
they were recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file on the
disc. Press the SCAN button to get
out of scan mode and play the last
track/file sampled.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6) also turns off scan.
This feature,
when activated, samples all the first
files in each folder on the disc in
order. To activate folder scan, press
andholdtheSCANbuttonfor2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in
each folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system then
plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first file of the last folder, the system
goes to normal playing.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the
SCAN button, also turns off folder
scan.
In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track List
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
FOLDER SCAN
Features
177
FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON
FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
＊
＊
＊
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, each track name is shown
in the audio display. With a disc
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder
number and the location are also
displayed.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, only the track number is shown.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon on the
screen.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , or
XM2 icon.IfaPCcardisinthe
audio unit, touch the CARD icon to
play the PC card. If a CD or CDs are
loaded in the CD changer, touch the
CDC icon to play the CD changer.
Press the CD button again or touch
the CD icon to switch back to the
disc player.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
Select the desired track/file by
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in
blue. The system begins to play the
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.
:U.S.EX-Lmodelonly
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a Disc
178
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
To remove a disc from the audio unit,
fold back the screen by pressing the
OPEN button (see page ). Press
the disc eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page .202
174
Playing a disc (Models with navigation system)
Removing a Disc
Protecting Discs
Features
179
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cause Solution
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Error
Message
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
TOC Error
High Temperature
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Disc Player Error Message (Models with navigation system)
180
DISC ERROR
MECH ERROR
DISC
HEAT ERROR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
−
＋
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Features
181
JOYSTICK
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
CD BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
CD ICON
TUNE BAR
U.S. EX-L model
CD CHANGER ICON
OPEN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
Canadian EX-L model
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
CD BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
TUNE BAR
OPEN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
JOYSTICK
RANDOM
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
CD CHANGER ICON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
CD ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the center console cover,
then slide open the CD changer
cover by pulling it rearward.
Push the EJECT button to remove
the CD magazine. The magazine
will pop up automatically.
Your vehicle has the CD changer in
the center console.
CD-R,CD-RWdisc,andCD
compressedinMP3andWMAwill
not work in this unit. Video CDs and
DVD discs also will not work.
Do not spill any liquids on the center
console. Spilled liquids can damage
electrical components in the CD
changer.
1. 2.
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Loading CDs in the Changer
182
EJECT BUTTON
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To install a CD into the magazine,
push the button while pulling out
on the tab.
Store all six trays in the magazine,
and reinstall the magazine in the
CD changer as shown.
PutaCDonthetraywiththe
printed surface facing up as shown.
Reinstall the tray in the magazine.
Repeat this procedure to open the
other five trays.
Make sure to slide the CD
changer cover closed until it clicks.
To remove CDs from the CD
changer, refer to the loading
procedure.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Features
183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
T
o pla
y CDs, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the in-
dash disc player or the radio. To
select the CD changer, touch the
CDC icon. The disc and track
numbers are displayed. The system
will continuously play a CD until you
change modes.
To select a different disc, press the
or side of the TUNE bar. If
you select an empty position in the
CD changer, the system will try to
load the CD in the next available
slot.
You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks. Each preset
buttonfunctionisshownonthe
bottom of the screen.
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
To Play a CD
184
TUNE
BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the CD
to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−Push the button
(preset 6) to play the next track on
the disc. Push the button
(preset5)oncetoreplaythetrackin
play; press it twice to replay the
previous track.
To move more rapidly
within a track, press and hold the
(preset 4) or (preset 3)
button.
To
continuously replay a track, press
and release the RPT button (preset
1). You will see TRACK REPEAT in
the display. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off.
To continuously
replay the current CD, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) until
you see the DISC REPEAT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
Press and release the RDM button
(preset 2) to play the tracks in
random order. You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press the
RDM button again to return to
normal play.
To play all
tracks in each CD in random order,
press and hold the RDM button
(preset 2) until you see DISC
RANDOM in the display. Press the
RDM button again to return to
normal play.
The SCAN
function samples all the tracks on
the selected disc in the order they
are recorded. To activate it, press
and release the SCAN button. You
will see TRACK SCAN in the display,
and you will get a 10 second
sampling of each track on the
selected CD. Press the SCAN button
again to get out of scan mode.
Press and hold the
SCAN button to get a 10 second
samplingofthefirstsongofeach
disc in the CD changer. You will see
DISC SCAN in the display. Press and
hold the button again to turn it off.
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
SKIP
FF/REW
REPEAT (Track Repeat)
DISC REPEAT
RANDOM (Track Random)
DISC RANDOM
SCAN (Track Scan)
DISC SCAN
Features
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
PresstheAM/FMorCD/XM
buttontoswitchtotheradioor
satellite radio while a CD is playing.
If there is a PC card in the audio unit,
touch the CARD icon to switch to
the PC card while a CD is playing.
Touch the CDC icon again to play
the CD in the CD changer.
If you turn the system off while a CD
in the CD changer is playing, the CD
will stay in the drive. When you turn
the system back on, the CD will be in
pause mode. Touch the CDC icon on
the audio screen. The CD will begin
playing where it left off.
:OnU.S.EX-Lmodelonly
To Stop Playing a CD
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
186
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Cause SolutionError
Message
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
The disc is pulled out.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Features
187
DISC ERROR
MECH ERROR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＋
＋
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
188
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
JOYSTICK
TUNE BAR
PC CARD ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
U.S. EX-L model
Canadian EX-L model
OPEN
BUTTON
CD/XM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SKIP
BUTTON
FAST
FORWARD
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
REPEAT BUTTON
TUNE BAR
OPEN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
RANDOM
BUTTON
SKIP
BUTTON
FAST
FORWARD
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
TRACK LIST ICON
PC CARD ICON
PLAY
MODE
ICON
AUDIO BUTTON
PLAY
MODE
ICON
SKIP
BUTTON
SKIP
BUTTON
JOYSTICK
CD/AUX
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
You operate the PC card player with
the same controls used for the radio
and the disc player. To load or play a
card, the ignition switch must be in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are:
Always use the recommended
memory card with the appropriate
adapter (if an adapter is needed).
Some memory cards will not work in
this unit.
When you insert a PC card into
the slot, make sure you put it in
straight. If you cannot insert it,
remove it, and insert again.
Do not keep PC cards in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage them.
To avoid damaging the card
reader, do not insert hard disc
drive cards into the PC card slot.
You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
until the PC card is inserted all the
way into its slot or removed.
Never insert foreign objects into
the PC card slot.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/
320 kbps (MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/
80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
SD memory card
CompactFlash
Flash ATA
The PC card player reads and plays
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
Depending on the format, the screen
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when
a card is playing. The card limit of
the player is 255 folders and 999
tracks. If the card has a complex
structure, it takes some time for the
system to begin playing it.
To Play a PC card
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
Features
189
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it
skips that file and plays the next
available folder or file.
The PC card slot is behind the
navigation screen. To use the PC
card player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the PC card slot appears.
Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
The drive will read the PC card and
begin to play it.
Return the screen to the upright
position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
panel.
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the PC card player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press any
of the appropriate control buttons.
The status bar appears on the
bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Loading a PC Card
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
190
PC CARD SLOT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Therearethreeplaymodes:Folder,
Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue.
Foldermodeplaystracksinthe
order they were added to the card.
Artistmodeplaystracksin
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Album mode plays albums
(folders) in alphabetical order.
If play mode information was not
included in the tracks/files when
they were added to the card, it will
not be displayed on the screen.
To Select a Play Mode
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
Features
191
FOLDER MODE
MODE INDICATOR
PLAY MODE ICON
PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON
MODE INDICATOR
MODE INDICATOR
ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
U.S. model is shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To select a play mode, push the
AUDIO button to show the audio
display, then touch the PLAY MODE
icon on the display.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press the ENT.
After you select the play mode, the
display changes to the selectable
playing menu. If you select
‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
192
PLAY MODE ICON
U.S. EX-L model is shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To go back to the previous screen,
presstheCANCELbuttononthe
rightsideofthescreen.Toexitthe
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button’s function is
shownonthebottomofthescreen.
Iconsonthescreencanalsobe
selected with the joystick. Move the
joystick left or right and up or down
until the icon is highlighted, then
press the ENT on the top of the
joystick to select the icon.
If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode immediately and begins to
play the new track list.
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
Features
193
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
U.S. EX-L model is shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
▲
▼
−−
−
−
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold (preset 4)
or (preset 3).
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
the next folder, and to the side to
move the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
To continuously replay
a file, press and release the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
TRACK REPEAT in the display.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
This feature
plays the files within a folder in
random order. To activate random
play, press and release the RDM
button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
This feature, when
activated, plays all files in each
folder/artist/album in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded or listed. To activate each
random play, push and hold the
RDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.
You will see FOLDER RANDOM,
ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUM
RANDOM in the display.
This feature, when
activated, replays all the files on the
selected folder/artist/album in the
order they are recorded or listed. To
activate each repeat mode, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or
ALBUM REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder/artist/album. Press
andholdtheRPTbuttonagainto
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE bar also turns
off the repeat feature.
SKIP
FF/REW
FOLDER SELECTION
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a folder)
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
RANDOM
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
REPEAT
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
194
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
The system plays the first file in the
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system plays the first
file in each folder, in order, for 10
seconds each. After playing the first
file of the last folder/artist/album,
the system returns to normal play.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
folder/artist/album with the TUNE
bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
also turns off the scan feature.
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate each random play by
pressing the RDM button again.
The SCAN function
samples all the files on the PC card
in the order they are recorded. To
activate the scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
seeTRACKSCANinthedisplay.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file on the PC card. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder/artist/album on the PC
card in order. To activate each scan
feature, press and hold the SCAN
button. You will see FOLDER SCAN,
ARTIST SCAN or ALBUM SCAN in
the display.
SCAN
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
SCAN
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
Features
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
In artist mode, the artist name is also
displayed on the right side of each
selectable icon. Select the desired
file.
Using a Track List
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
196
RETURN ICON
FOLDER ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
ARTIST NAME
U.S. EX-L model is shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In album mode, the album name is
also displayed on the right side of
each selectable icon. Select the
desired file.
When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from
the track list display, the song search
menu appears.
You can then select any of three
modes to search a file: Title by
Keyword, Artist, and Album.
CONTINUED
Song Search Function
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
Features
197
ARTIST ICON
TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
RETURN ICON
SONG SEARCH ICON
ALBUM ICON
Folder mode is shown.
ALBUM NAME
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword Searching for a Song by Artist Name
After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
through the list, touch the or
icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing the ENT.
Select the Artist icon, and the artist
list appears. Select the desired artist,
and the artist’s file list is displayed.
In Title by Keyword mode, enter the
title name, or any keyword, by
touching the letter icons on the
screen. Press the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the
CANCELbuttononthecontrolpanel,
the display returns to the mode
menu without doing a search.
To cancel the selected letter, touch
the Delete icon. To select more
characters, touch the More icon.
The other character list will be
shown.
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
198
MORE ICON
DELETE ICON
LIST ICON
FILE LIST
ARTIST LIST
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
Searching for a Song by Album Name
: U.S. EX-L model
Select the Album icon, and the
album list appears. Select the desired
album, and its song list is displayed.
You can then select the desired song
from the list.
To remove a PC card from the audio
unit, fold back the screen by
pressing the OPEN button (see page
). Press the eject button ( )
to remove the card. If you do not
remove it from the slot, you cannot
return the screen to the upright
position.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You can also eject a card when the
ignition switch is off.
If there is a problem with the PC
card player, see your dealer.
To play the radio when a PC card is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , or
XM2 icon. If a disc is in the audio
unit, press the CD button or touch
theCDicontoplaythedisc.IfaCD
or CDs are in the CD changer, touch
the CDC icon to play the disc(s).
Touch the CARD icon to switch back
to the PC card player.
If you turn the system off while a PC
card is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the card will begin
playing where it left off.
When you leave the vehicle, always
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
174
To Stop Playing a PC card
PC Card Player Malfunction
Removing a PC Card
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
Features
199
ALBUM LIST
Main Menu
Table of Contents
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio ReceptionRadio Frequencies
AM/FM Radio Reception
200
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the disc to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the system or the magazine.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
202
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
＋
−
＋
−
＋−
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
disc, a PC card, or CD changer (if a
disc(s) or a PC card is loaded). On
models with satellite radio system,
you can also select XM1 and XM2.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
each time you press the top ( ) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
( ) to return to the beginning of the
current track/file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track/file.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.IfyoupressandholdtheCH
button ( ) or ( ), the system goes
into the seek mode. It finds a station
with a strong signal.
CONTINUED
On EX, and EX-L models
Remote Audio Controls
Features
203
CH BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
＋
−
Your vehicle has the auxiliary input
jack on the front panel, on the center
table, or in the console compartment,
depending on models. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top ( ) of the
CH button until you hear a beep, to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top ( ) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom( )togobacktothe
previous file.
On Navigation model
Auxiliary Input Jack
Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit
204
EX-L model
LX model
EX model
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
nexttimeyouturnonthesystem.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
code. On vehicles with navigation
system, touch the icon to enter the
code number, then touch the Done
icon to set the code. The code is on
the radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific digit code using the
preset buttons (icon on vehicle’s with
navigation system). Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from specific
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
Radio Theft Protection
Features
205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the R button sets the clock
back to the previous hour. If the
displayed time is after the half hour,
the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
Setting the Clock
206
EX and EX-L models without
navigation system
CLOCK BUTTON
(A.SEL side of the A.SEL/SCAN bar)
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 1)
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 3)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 2)
LX model
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
CLOCK BUTTON (AM)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If equipped
Once the security system is set,
opening any door without using the
key or the remote transmitter, the
hood, or the tailgate will cause the
system to alarm.
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any of the
doors are not fully closed. If the
system will not set, check the doors
and the tailgate. You can also check
the open monitor on the instrument
panel (see page ), to see if the
doors and the tailgate are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood, the
tailgate, and all doors are closed.
Push the lock button twice within 5
seconds. There should be an audible
confirmation beep.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or use the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doorsandthetailgatefromthe
outside with the key, driver’s lock
tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
63
Security System
Features
207
NOTE:
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼
▲
When in reverse, the touch screen
and navigation system ‘‘hard’’
buttons are locked out, except the
‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘ ’’
or ‘‘ ’’ button allows you to adjust
the brightness of the rearview
camera image.
Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
On EX-L model with navigation system
Rearview Camera and Monitor
208
The camera brightness cannot be
adjusted by voice control.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
1.
2.
3.Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
209
SET/DECELCANCEL
RES/ACCEL
CRUISE
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
thecruisecontrol.Toresumetheset
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel goes out. When
the vehicle slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/DECEL
button.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
210
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),andthen
press and release the RES/ACCEL
button. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator comes on. The vehicle
accelerates to the same speed as
before.
Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 214
.................Fuel Recommendation . 214
.........Service Station Procedures . 215
....................................Refueling . 215
........Check Fuel Cap Message . 216
Opening and Closing
................................the Hood . 217
...................................Oil Check . 218
.............Engine Coolant Check . 218
...............................Fuel Economy . 219
...Accessories and Modifications . 220
.............................Carrying Cargo . 222
Before Driving
Before Driving
213
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
During this period:
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Do not tow a trailer.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
We recommended using a quality
gasoline containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
214
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Before Driving
215
TETHER
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
5.
6.
310
310
Service Station Procedures
Check Fuel Cap Message
216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Reach in between the hood and
the front grille with your fingers.
The hood latch handle is above
the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle up
until it releases the hood. Lift the
hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole pointed
by an arrow in the hood.
2.1. 3.
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
217
LATCH
CLIP
GRIP
SUPPORT ROD
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
1.
2.
3.
4.
267
270
Oil Check
Adding Engine Oil
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Service Station Procedures
218
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MAX
MIN
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Refer to
on page for
information about checking other
items on your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
messages displayed in the
information display. See
on page
.
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
262
262
For example,
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy
Before Driving
219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
312
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
220
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components, with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Herearesomeexamples:
Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Before Driving
221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Lower glove box
Upper glove box
Console compartment
Door pockets
Seat-back pockets
Seat-under Tray (if equipped)
Center pocket
Cargo area, including the rear
seatswhenfoldedupordown.
Upperandlowercargoareaswith
the dual deck cargo shelf (if
equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Roof-rack (if equipped)
Carrying Cargo
222
SEAT-BACK
POCKETS
CENTER POCKET
UPPER
GLOVE BOX
LOWER
GLOVE BOX
CARGO AREA
: If equipped
SEAT UNDER
TRAY
CENTER CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
DOOR POCKETS
DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−×
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit:
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850
lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
[The placard is on the driver’s
doorjamb.]
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 lbs.
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,
and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
yourvehicle(seepage ).
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) or the gross axle
weight rating (GAWR). Both are on
a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
246
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
Before Driving
223
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
Keep the lower glove box closed
while driving. If it is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Do not stack items higher than the
back of the rear seats. They can
block your view and be thrown
around the vehicle during a crash.
Ifyoufoldtherearseatsupor
down, tie down items that could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep
all cargo below the bottom of the
windows. If it is higher, it could
interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
with any rear seat folded up or down.
54
On all models except LX
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
224
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Do not exceed the dual deck cargo
shelf load limit of 20 lbs on U.S.
models, and 10 kg on Canadian
models.
Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
if the rear seats are folded down.
Do not put any items on the dual
deck cargo shelf that could block
your view or be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
On all models except LX
On U.S. model is shown
Carrying Cargo
Carring Cargo on the Dual Deck
Cargo Shelf
Before Driving
225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The four hooks on the floor can be
used to install a net for securing
items.
Your vehicle also has cargo hooks on
side panel in the cargo area.
They are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
thehook.Makesureanyitemsput
on each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs
(3 kg).
Theseparationnetcanbeusedto
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
On LX model
Cargo HooksOptional Separation Net
Carrying Cargo
226
HOOK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the vehicle stability assist
(VSA) system, the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) and facts
you need if you are planning to tow a
trailerordriveoff-highway.
........................Driving Guidelines . 228
....................Preparing to Drive . 229
.......................Starting the Engine . 230
..............Automatic Transmission . 231
...........................................Parking . 236
.............................Braking System . 237
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 238
Vehicle Stability Assist
............................(VSA) System . 240
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
......................................(TPMS) . 242
...........................Towing a Trailer . 245
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
................................Motorhome . 250
Off-Highway Driving
..................................Guidelines . 252
Driving
Driving
227
Main Menu
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
You still need to exercise the same
care when accelerating, steering, and
brakingthatyouwouldinatwo-
wheel drive vehicle.
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Your vehicle is equipped with a four-
wheel drive (4WD) system. When
the system senses a loss of front-
wheel traction, it automatically
transfers some power to the rear
wheels. This gives you better
traction and mobility.
Four-wheel drive models
See page for off-highway driving
guidelines.
252
Driving Guidelines
228
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page ).
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
1.
2.
10.
14
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.288
94
108
79
59
Driving Guidelines
Preparing to Drive
Driving
229
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
80
Starting theEngine
230
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and press
the release button on the side of the
shiftlever.Youcannotshiftoutof
Park when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
CONTINUED
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
Automatic Transmission
Driving
231
SHIFT LEVER
U.S. model is shown
RELEASE
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the side of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestopandthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
235
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
DtoD
DtoD
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
Press the D button.
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Park (P) Reverse (R)
232
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
Press the D3 switch on the side of
the shift lever to turn this mode on
or off; the D3 mode indicator comes
on whenever the D3 mode is
selected.
D3 mode can be turned on or off
only when the ignition switch is in
the ON (II) position and the shift
lever is in the D position.
WhentheD3modeison,the
transmission selects only the first
three gears. Use D3 mode when
towing a trailer, or to provide engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
D3 mode can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
CONTINUED
Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
Automatic Transmission
D3 Mode
Driving
233
D3 MODE INDICATOR
D3 SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position turns this mode
off. When you restart the engine,
select the D position and press the
D3 mode switch again to use this
mode.
TheD3modeindicatoralsocomes
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If you shift into first position when
the vehicle speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h), the transmission shifts
into second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
To shift to second,
pressthereleasebuttonontheside
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
Shifting out from the D position will
canceltheD3mode,andtheD3
indicator will go out. Selecting the D
position again will resume the D3
mode and the indicator comes on.
3
Automatic Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter
Second (2)
First (1)
234
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Set the parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the edge of the cover to remove
it.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the right side. Press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Driving
235
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
RELEASE BUTTON
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
On EX and EX-L models
Parking Tips
Parking
236
curb and set the parking brake.
curb and set the parking brake.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake wear
indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Braking System
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Driving
237
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to-
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page .311
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
238
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also be shut
down.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
311
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Driving
239
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some unusual noise from the
modulator. You will also see the VSA
activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even
when the VSA system is turned off
by pressing the VSA OFF switch
(see page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA off switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
241
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Activation Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again
turns the system back on.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
292
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving
241
VSA OFF SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire.
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low, the sensor in that
tire immediately sends a signal that
causes the low tire pressure
indicator to come on.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
242
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page ).
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even
when the VSA system is turned off
by pressing the VSA OFF switch
(see page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA off switch again.
288
290
241
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Driving
243
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
Each wheel (except the compact
sparetirewheel)isequippedwitha
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire, the
low tire pressure indicator stays on.
This is normal; the system is not
monitoring the spare tire pressure.
Manually check the spare tire
pressure to be sure it is correct.
298
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
244
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
Be sure to read the
sectiononpage
if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page ).214
252
CONTINUED
Towing a Trailer
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight:
Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines
Break-In Period
Driving
245
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 % of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40 % toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.
The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 4,560 lbs
(2,070 kg).
Theweightthatthe
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10 % of the total trailer weight. Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 6,060 lbs (2,750
kg)
The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not exceed
2,310 lbs (1,050 kg) on the front axle,
and 2,290 lbs (1,040 kg) on the rear
axle.
If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
If you cannot get to a public scale,
you can estimate the total trailer
weight by adding the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the
manufacturer) with everything in or
on the trailer.
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Tongue Load:
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR)
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR)
246
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check with
your local trailer sales or rental
agencies for the requirements in the
area where you plan to tow, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and maintained, and that it
meets federal, state, province, and
local regulations.
Seeyourtrailerdealerorrental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicles hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) or
more be equipped with its own
electric or surge-type brakes.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
CONTINUED
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights
Trailer Brakes
Safety Chains
Hitches
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Driving
247
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and suspension and
cooling system are in good
operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the left
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
thedrawingaboveforthewiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist
Additional Towing Equipment
248
HAZARD
(PINK)
TRAILER
(WHITE)
TAILLIGHT
(RED)
RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
(BROWN)
BRAKE
LIGHT
(LIGHT
GREEN)
GROUND
(BLACK)
LEFT TURN
SIGNAL
(ORANGE)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and use the D3 position.
Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. D is the
proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘ ’’ in the
following column for additional gear
information.)
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
3
Towing a Trailer
Handling Crosswinds and Buff eting
Driving on Hills
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Driving
249
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur. To avoid damage
to the 4WD system, your vehicle
must be towed with all four wheels
on the ground (flat towing).
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
Perform the following procedure
every day immediately before you
begin towing. Otherwise severe
automatic transmission damage will
occur.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
When you stop towing your vehicle
and shift out of the neutral position,
you may not be able to move the
shift lever from neutral to reverse or
Park.Ifthishappens,pressthe
brake pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, then
shift out of neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
sockets are turned off so you do
not run down the battery.
Release the parking brake.
ShifttoD,thentoN.Letthe
engine run for 3 minutes, then
turn it off.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Check the transmission fluid level
(see page ).
Start the engine.
273
bottom
Do not overfill.
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome
Backing Up
Parking
250
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
Only remove the fuse after you have
performed the transmission shifting
procedure, and the key is in the
ACCESSORY (I) position. Store the
fuse in an obvious location (center
tray, coin pockets, etc) as a reminder
to re-install the fuse before driving
the vehicle.
If you tow a CR-V behind a
motorhome, the transmission fluid
must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever
comes first.
Extended Towing
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
251
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
ACCESSORY RADIO FUSE
The steering system can bedamaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
towing.
Failure to follow the recommended
instructions exactly will result in severe
automatic transmission damage. If you
cannot shift the transmission or start
the engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a flat-bed truck or
trailer.
Severe transmission damage will occur
if the vehicle is shifted from reverse to
neutral and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
Radio fuse to reduce drain on the
battery. T
his fu
se is located in the
When towing your vehicle for long
interior fuse box a
nd is shown as
periods, remove the 7.5 A Accessory
number 34 below.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. So be sure to read this
owner’s manual, pay special attention
to the precautions and tips in this
section, and get acquainted with
your vehicle before you leave the
pavement.
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic
sites, and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page and ).
Wherever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
223 246
General Information Important Safety Precautions
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
252
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue,
. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
do not try to
turn around
Check Out Your Vehicle
Remember
Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles
Driving on Slopes
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
253
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid driving through deep water. If
you encounter water in your route (a
small stream or large puddle, for
example), evaluate it carefully before
going ahead. Make sure it is shallow,
flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of
the depth or the ground, turn around
andfindanotherroute.
Driving through deep water can also
damage your vehicle. The water can
get into the transmission and
differential, diluting the lubricant
and causing an eventual failure. It
can also wash the grease out of the
wheel bearings.
Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,
or other surfaces where you could
get stuck. If you do happen to get
stuck because of inclement weather
or other conditions, choose a safe
and appropriate course of action.
You should never use a jack to try
getting unstuck. A jack only works
on firm, level ground. Also, your
vehicle could easily slip off the jack
and hurt you or someone else.
If you spin the wheels excessively
trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat the components of the
4-wheel drive system. If this happens,
the 4-wheel drive system shuts off
and only the front wheels receive
power. If this happens, stop and
allow everything to cool down. The
4-wheel drive system will work again
after its temperature drops.
If you slip the clutch for a long time
while trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat and damage it.
If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream
4-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
254
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, a
maintenance record, and instructions
for simple maintenance tasks you
may want to take care of yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 256
....................Maintenance Minder . 257
....................Maintenance Record . 264
..............................Fluid Locations . 266
........................Adding Engine Oil . 267
Changing the Engine Oil and
...........................................Filter . 268
..............................Engine Coolant . 270
....................Windshield Washers . 272
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 273
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 275
....................................Brake Fluid . 275
....................Power Steering Fluid . 276
.............................................Lights . 277
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 283
.....................................Floor Mats . 283
..............................Audio Antenna . 284
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 284
.................................Wiper Blades . 285
...............................................Tires . 288
...........................................Wheels . 293
...................Checking the Battery . 294
.............................Vehicle Storage . 295
337
Maintenance
Maintenance
255
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
256
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
The remaining engine oil life is
shownonthedisplayaccordingto
this table:
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then press and release
the Select/Reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page ).
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
65
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance
257
SELECT/RESET KNOB
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
below the engine oil life indicator.
Maintenance Minder
258
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
ENGINE LIFE
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the
average fuel mileage, press and
release the Select/Reset knob on the
instrument panel.
Whentheengineoillifeis15to1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
263
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
All maintenance items displayed in
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the average fuel
mileage, press and release the
Select/Reset knob.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on the
following.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
1.
2.263
Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
260
MAIN ITEM
SUB ITEM (S)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
Press the Select/Reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The information
displayshowstheresetmode
initial display as shown.
Select the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ indicator by
turning the Select/Reset knob.
The display begins to blink. Push
the same knob to enter this setting.
The engine oil life and the
maintenance item code(s) will
begin to blink. Push the Select/
Reset knob to reset.
The maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
4.3.
5.
6.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
261
EX and EX-L model
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
＃
−
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate light monthly.
See page .
218
218
273
275
288
277
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
262
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＃
＃
＊
＃
＊
＊
Maintenance Minder
263
:
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Independent of the maintenance items in the information display, replace
the brake fluid every 3 years.
NOTE:
1:
2:262
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differencial fluid
A
B
Symbol Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
4WD
6
1
1
2
Maintenance Minder
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
264
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
265
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
266
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
POWER STEERING
FLUID
(Red cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Adding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
267
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1.
2.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
268
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
269
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
270
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushingitdownandturningit
counterclockwise.
3.
4.
2.
1.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
271
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
65
On Canadian models:
Windshield Washers
272
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going step 2, but don’t wait
longer than 90 seconds.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
273
DIPSTICK
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 by
your dealer as soon as it is
convenient.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
6.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
274
Main Menu
Table of Contents
4WD model only
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. Have your dealer replace the
rear differential fluid.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the maintenance messages shown on
the information display.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
Use Honda Dual Pump Fluid only.
Do not use automatic transmission
fluid (ATF).
Rear Differential Fluid Brake Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid, Brake Fluid
Maintenance
275
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Power Steering Fluid
276
LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustmentsshouldbedonebyyour
dealer or other qualified technician.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Open the hood.
To change the headlight bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
under-hood fuse box from its stay
by pulling it out of its stay.
1.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
277
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
→
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure one of the three arrows
on the rubber seal is facing up; it is
marked ‘‘ .’’
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
(Driver’s side)
Reinstall the under-hood fuse box.
4.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lights
278
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
(Driver’s side)
Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.
Open the hood.
To change the turn signal bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its holder.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Light Bulb
Maintenance
279
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the fuse box in place
securely.
(Driver’s side)
Open the hood.
To change the parking light/front
side marker on the driver’s side,
removethefuseboxfromitsstay
by pulling out.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lights
Replacing a Parking Light/Front
Side Marker Light Bulb
280
FUSE BOX
On the passenger’s side
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, back-
up light, turn signal, or side
marker.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the taillight assembly
mounting screw under each cover.
Pull the taillight assembly out of
the rear pillar.
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover. Remove the
covers by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tip
screwdriver.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
CONTINUED
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Lights
Maintenance
281
BULBS
COVER
SCREWS
BULBS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Align the clips on the taillight
assembly with the holes in the
body, then push the taillight
assembly into place. Tighten the
two mounting screws securely and
reinstall the covers.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on the side edge of
the cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a
small flat-tip screwdriver and
pulling the cover off.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Unlatch the top of the cover by
pulling back on it with hands.
1. 2.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
282
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Press the brake pedal to make
sure the new bulb is working.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Put the cover back on the light
assembly. Push it in until it locks
in place.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CONTINUED
Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Maintenance
283
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
s
t
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
canbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomeslessthanusual.
Dust and Pollen FilterAudio Antenna
Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter
284
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof. Before
using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,
remove the antenna by unscrewing it by
hand. This prevents the antenna from
being damaged by the car wash brushes.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a front wiper blade:
Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slidethebladeassemblytoward
the lock tab until it releases from
the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
285
LOCK TAB
WIPER ARMS
FRONT
BLADE
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage
the hood and the wiper arms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch
of the rein-forcement, as shown.
5.
6.
7.
4.
Wiper Blades
286
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
TOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lower the wiper arm against the
windshield.
Install the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Slide the new blade into the holder.
Make sure it is engaged in the slot
along its full length.
Insert both ends of the blade into
the holder. Make sure they are
secure.
Pull one end of the blade out from
the holder.
Slide the blade out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
To replace a rear wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pivoting the
blade assembly upward.
3.
5.
4.
6.
7.
1.
2.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
287
REAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page for
more information.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
242
Inflation Guidelines
Tires
288
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressuresonthispage.
324
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
Maintenance
289
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
225/65R17 102T 30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm
)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Tires
Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance
290
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda
wheel weights for balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
diagram each time they are rotated.
If you purchase directional tires,
rotate only front-to-back.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
notworkonthattire.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Tires
Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels
Maintenance
291
Front Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal link-
type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
324
326
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Winter Driving
Snow Tires
Tire Chains
292
17x61/2J
225/65R17 102T
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
If equipped
Wheels
Tires, Wheels
Maintenance
293
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
may see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
).205
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
294
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 298
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 299
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 303
................................Jump Starting . 305
..............If the Engine Overheats . 307
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 309
..........Charging System Indicator . 309
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 310
...............Brake System Indicator . 311
..............................................Fuses . 312
..............................Fuse Locations . 315
......................Emergency Towing . 317
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
297
Main Menu
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
The low tire pressure indicator
stays on when you are driving with
thecompactsparetire.TheTPMS
indicator may also come on after
several miles (kilometers) driving.
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Compact Spare Tire
298
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo
area floor lid by lifting up with the
strap, and remove it from cargo
area by disengaging the tabs.
When you store the flat tire in the
spare tire well, do not reinstall the
cargo area floor lid forcibly. This
will damage the tabs on the lid.
Take the tool kit out of the spare
tire.
1.
2. 3.
4.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
299
JACK
SPARE TIRE
TOOLS
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Take the jack out of the spare tire
area.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack by lifting it
straight up.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Placethejackunderthejacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
6.
5. 7. 8.
Changing a Flat Tire
300
JACK
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
JACKING POINT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
9.
10.
11.
13.
12.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
301
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
BRAKE HUB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire.
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and place
thecoverontheflattireofthe
cargo area.
Store the center cap in the spare
tire well. Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
Close the tailgate.
16.
17.
15.
14.
19.
20.
21.18.
Changing a Flat Tire
302
For spare
tire
For normal
tire
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Loose items can fly around the
interiorinacrashandcould
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page ).
305
305
294
317
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
303
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
61
230
317
312
IftheEngineWon’tStart
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
304
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
＋
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc. Put the transmission in
Park, and set the parking brake.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
305
BOOSTER BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the stud bolt on the
engine side as shown. Do not
connect this jumper cable to any
other part of the engine.
6.
7.
5.
4.
Jump Starting
306
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
The reading of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge reading comes down to the
midpoint, then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge reading
stays at the red mark, turn off the
engine.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
1.
2.
3.
4.
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
307
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
reading at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the reading
reaches the middle of the
temperature gauge or lower
before checking the radiator.
9.
8.
7.
6.
5.
10.
11.
317
317
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
308
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
1.
2.
4.
3.
218
317
267
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
309
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
also come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It can take
several days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to
for more
information (see page ).
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
332Readiness Codes
State
Emissions Testing
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
310
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
275
317
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
311
Canada
U.S.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The interior fuse box is located
under the dashboard on the driver’s
side. The fuse label is attached
under the steering column.
The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages and , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
two fuse boxes.
315
316
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
312
TAB
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD
(PRIMARY)
FUSE LABELFUSE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
pullerprovidedonthebackofthe
under-hood fuse box cover.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the side window
at the wire inside. Removing these
fuses requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
3. 4.1.
2.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
313
FUSE BLOWN FUSE BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
Your vehicle has spare fuses on
the back of the under-hood fuse
box cover.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
may see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page ).
On vehicles with a navigation system,
touch the appropriate icon to enter
the code number (see page ).
6.
5.
205
205
Fuses
314
BLOWN
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper rating
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. Amps.No. Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
7.5 A
20 A
(20 A)
20 A
20 A
(20 A)
15 A
15 A
20 A
(15 A)
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
(15 A)
(20 A)
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
15 A
Power Window Relay
Fuel Pump
ACG
ABS/VSA
Heated Seats
Front Fog Lights
Not used
Rear Wiper
ODS (Ocupant Detection
System)
Meter
SRS
Right Headlight High Beam
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Light (Interior)
Small Light (Exterior)
Right Headlight Low Beam
Left Headlight Low Beam
Main Headlight High Beam
Small Lights MAIN
TPMS
Headlight Low Beam
Not used
Not used
Moonroof
Door Lock
Front Left Power Window
HAC Option
Rear Accessory Socket
Accessory
Front Right Power Window
Accessory Power Socket on
the Center Table
Rear Right Power Window
Rear Left power window
ACC Radio
ACC Key lock
HAC
Daytime Running Lights
Front Wiper
: If equipped
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
315
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. No. Amps.Circuits ProtectedAmps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
(20 A)
(20 A)
7.5 A
(30 A)
(15 A)
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
Battery
EPS
Option Main
Ignition Switch Main
ABS/VSA FSR
ABS/VSA Motor
Headlight Main
Power Window Main
EPT-R
Sub Fan Motor
Main Fan Motor
Rear Defogger
Blower
Hazard
LAF
Stop and Horn
100 A
(70 A)
80 A
50 A
20 A
40 A
50 A
40 A
(30 A)
20 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
PowerSeatDRRRHI/
Reclining
Power Seat DR FR HI/Sliding
IGPS OIL LEVEL
EPT-L
High Power Sound
IG Coil
FI Main
MG Clutch
DBW
Interior Light
Back Up
: If equipped
Fuse Locations
316
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Refer to
on page
for non-emergency towing
information.
250
On 4WD models
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment.
Towing Your Vehicle
Behind a Motorhome
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
317
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the 4WD
system. It should be transported on a
flat-bed truck or trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 320
................................Specifications . 322
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 324
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 324
.................................Treadwear . 324
......................................Traction . 324
.............................Temperature . 325
.................................Tire Labeling . 326
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
............................Explanation . 327
.......................Emissions Controls . 329
.....................The Clean Air Act . 329
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 329
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 329
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 329
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 330
....................PGM-FI System . 330
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 330
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 330
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 330
....................Replacement Parts . 330
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 331
..............State Emissions Testing . 332
Technical Information
Technical Information
319
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
To access the VIN in the engine
compartment, pull down the lid on
the back of the engine compartment.
Make sure to close the lid before
closing the hood.
Identification Numbers
320
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The engine number is stamped into
the front of the engine block.
You can see the engine number
through the window next to the ‘‘H’’
logo.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
321
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
322
Dimensions
Weights
Engine
Capacities
Capacities
177.9 in (4,518 mm)Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
66.1 in (1,680 mm)
103.1 in (2,620 mm)
61.6 in (1,565 mm)
61.6 in (1,565 mm)
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC
i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
9.7 : 1
IZFR6K-11
SKJ20DR-M11
Fuel tank
Engine oil
15.3 US gal (58
)
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
1.32 US gal (5.0
)
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
Engine
coolant
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
washer
reservoir
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
7.6 US qt (7.2 )
2.7 US qt (2.6 )
1.3 US qt (1.2 )
1.5 US qt (1.4 )
7.4 US qt (7.0 )
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
Approx.
Front
Rear
Change
Without filter
Total
1:
2:
(NGK)
(DENSO)
Change
Total
Change
4WD
2WD
Total
4WD
2WD
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada
Vehicles
71.6 in (1,820 mm)
1
2
Including filter
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
323
Air Conditioning
Battery
Fuses
Alignment
Tires
Lights
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.2 16.8 oz (430 480 g)
SP-10
12 V
12 V
50/55 W
21 W
36 AH/5 HR
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21 W
3CP
8W
8W
8W
5W
21 W
21/5 W
21 W
12 V
47 AH/20 HR12 V
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Capacity
12 V 3 CP
Interior
Under-hood
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.0in(0mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°00’
1°45’
225/65R17 102TSize
Pressure
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
T155/90D17 101M
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Headlights
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights/side marker
lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Cargo area light
Rear side marker lights
High-mount brake light
See page 315 or the fuse label
attached under the steering
column.
See page 316 or the fuse box
cover.
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High/Low
(Amber)
(HB2)
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
(Amber)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
324
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature A,B,C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
325
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
of the tire.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Max Press The maximum air
pressurethetirecanhold.
Max Load The maximum load the
tire can carry at maximum air
pressure.
R
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
65
T
102
225
17
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
326
225/65R17 102T
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Information
327
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
328
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
329
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls
Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Emissions Controls
330
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
331
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
for at least 20 minutes. Drive on
the highway in D. Do not use the
cruise control. When traffic allows,
drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal.
(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;
this is okay.) If you cannot do this
for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive
for at least 30 seconds, then repeat
it two more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
332
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
320
Customer Service Information
334
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2007 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2007 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
335
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
336
http://www.safercar.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
７
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Authorized Manuals
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
337
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$75.00
$50.00
$44.00
$36.00
$30.00
$12.00
$15.00
FREE
Form Description
2007 Honda CR-V
Service Manual
2007 Honda CR-V
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2007 Honda CR-V
Body Repair Manual
2007 Honda CR-V
Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda CR-V
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda CR-V
Honda Service History
2007 Honda CR-V
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Publication
Form Number
61SWA00
61SWA00EL
62SWA30
31SWA600
31SWA800
31SWAM00
31SWAQ00
HON-R
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
338
NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name,
and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be
sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 60, 309
............................Jump Starting . 305
..............................Maintenance . 294
............................Specifications . 323
..............................Before Driving . 213
....................................Belts,Seat .8,18
.........................Beverage Holders . 110
..................................Booster Seats . 51
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 238
.............Break-in, New Linings . 214
....................Bulb Replacement . 277
...........................................Fluid . 275
.........................................Parking . 78
.................System Indicator . 60, 311
..........................System Design . 237
........................Wear Indicators . 237
.............................Braking System . 237
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 214
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 75
..................Brights, Headlights . 74, 75
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 281
..............................Brake Lights . 281
................Front Parking Lights . 280
........Front Side Marker Lights . 280
.................................Headlights . 277
.........High-mount Brake Light . 282
.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 281
............................Specifications . 323
....................Turn Signal Lights . 279
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 277
............................Capacities Chart . 322
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
....................................Accessories . 220
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 81
............Accessory Power Sockets . 117
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 268
.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 78
...........................Advanced Airbags . 27
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 22
..............Air Conditioning System . 124
.........................................Usage . 125
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 289
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 214
......................................Antifreeze . 270
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 61, 238
...................................Operation . 238
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 205
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 81
................................Audio System . 129
.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 84
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 20
.............Automatic Speed Control . 209
..............Automatic Transmission . 231
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 322
...............Checking Fluid Level . 273
.....................................D Mode . 233
.......................................Shifting . 231
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 231
................Shift Lever Positions . 232
....................Shift Lock Release . 235
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 204
3
Index
A
B
C
INDEX
I
Main Menu
＊
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 4, 72
................Daytime Running Lights . 75
Daytime Running Lights
.......................................Indicator . 63
.................................Dead Battery . 305
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 336
................Defogger, Rear Window . 77
..............Defrosting the Windows . 128
.......................Detachable Anchor . 104
....................................Dimensions . 322
.........Dimming the Headlights . 74, 75
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 273
..................................Engine Oil . 218
..........................Directional Signals . 74
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 237
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 269
..............................................Cargo . 222
...........................Cargo area Light . 121
.................................Cargo Hooks . 225
.............................Carrying Cargo . 222
....................Cargo, How to Carry . 222
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
.........................................CD Care . 202
..........................CD Changer . 154, 181
CD Changer Error
...........................Messages . 159, 187
.............CD Error Messages . 159, 187
......................CD Player . 135, 152, 172
...............................Center Pocket . 110
..................................Center Table . 114
........................Certification Label . 320
.................................Chains, Tires . 292
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 299
.................................Changing Oil . 267
........................................How to . 267
......................................When to . 263
....Charging System Message . 60, 309
............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 216
............Checklist, Before Driving . 229
.....................................Child Safety . 34
..............................Booster Seats . 51
.............................Child Seats . 34, 39
.....Important Safety Reminders . 34
..........................................Infants . 39
............................Large Children . 50
.........................................LATCH . 43
......................Risks with Airbags . 35
.............................Small Children . 40
.........................................Tethers . 48
...........................Warning Labels . 36
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35
.................................Child Seats . 34, 39
.........................................LATCH . 43
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 48
..................Childproof Door Locks . 88
.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 283
..............................................Clock . 206
........................CO in the Exhaust . 329
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 230
...............Consumer Information . 334
.............Controls, Instruments and . 57
....................Conversation Mirror . 117
Coolant
........................................Adding . 270
....................................Checking . 218
.........................Proper Solution . 270
...................Temperature Gauge . 69
..............................Courtesy Light . 121
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 329
................Cruise Control Indicator . 62
............Cruise Control Operation . 209
.............Customer Service Office . 334
Index
D
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Doors
..........................Auto Door Lock . 84
.......................Auto Door Unlock . 86
..............Childproof Door Locks . 88
..............Locking and Unlocking . 84
......................Power Door Locks . 82
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 324
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 227
....................................Economy . 219
........................Driving Guidelines . 228
.........................................D Mode . 233
................Dual Deck Cargo Shelf . 111
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 284
..............................Economy, Fuel . 219
..................................Emergencies . 297
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 305
...........Brake System Indicator . 311
................Changing a Flat Tire . 299
.....Charging System Indicator . 309
..................Checking the Fuses . 312
.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 76
............................Jump Starting . 305
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 309
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 310
..................Overheated Engine . 307
.......................................Towing . 317
...........................Emergency Brake . 78
......................Emergency Flashers . 76
......................Emergency Towing . 317
.......................Emissions Controls . 329
.............Emissions Testing, State . 332
Engine
............Adding Engine Coolant . 270
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 69
.........................If It Won’t Start . 303
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 60, 310
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 309
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 267
...............................Overheating . 307
............................Specifications . 322
............................Speed Limiter . 234
.......................................Starting . 230
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 214
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 329
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 16
...................................Fan, Interior . 125
.........................................Features . 123
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 215
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 284
...............................................Oil . 268
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 299
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 273
..........................................Brake . 275
..........................Power Steering . 276
..................Windshield Washer . 272
...................Folding Rear Seat . 99, 102
..........................Four-way Flashers . 76
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 25
Front Seat
......................................Adjusting . 94
.......................................Heaters . 105
.....................................Airbags . 9, 25
3
Index
E
F
INDEX
III
Main Menu
.................................................Fuel . 214
........Check Fuel Cap Message . 216
......................Fill Door and Cap . 215
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 63
...........................................Gauge . 66
................Octane Requirement . 214
...............................Oxygenated . 214
........................Tank, Refueling . 215
...............................Fuel Economy . 219
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 312
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 219
..........................................Gasohol . 214
.........................................Gasoline . 214
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 63
...........................................Gauge . 69
................Octane Requirement . 214
........................Tank, Refueling . 215
................Gas Station Procedures . 215
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 69
...............................................Fuel . 69
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 231
......................................Glove Box . 114
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.............................(GVWR) . 246, 322
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 277
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 277
............Daytime Running Lights . 75
..................High Beam Indicator . 63
.........................Reminder Chime . 75
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 277
...................................Turning on . 74
..............................Head Restraints . 97
.............................Heated Mirrors . 109
...................................Heater, Seat . 105
.....................Heating and Cooling . 124
............................High Beam Lever . 74
.......................Hood, Opening the . 217
..............................................Horn .4,72
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 320
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 79
...........................................Switch . 81
............Timing Control System . 330
........................Immobilizer System . 80
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
Indicators
......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 61, 238
Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 60, 311
................Charging System . 60, 309
.............................Cruise Control . 62
DRL (Daytime Running
......................................Lights) . 63
...................................High Beam . 63
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 61
......................................Low Fuel . 63
................Low Oil Pressure . 60, 309
..............Low Tire Pressure . 64, 242
..........Maintenance Minder . 65, 257
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 60, 310
.................Passenger Airbag Off . 32
...........................Side Airbag Off . 61
...............................................SRS . 61
...................................TPMS . 64, 243
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..................................................Keys . 79
.......................Label, Certification . 320
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 74
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 43
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 277
.......................................Indicator . 59
.........................................Parking . 74
..................................Turn Signal . 74
....................................Load Limits . 223
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 81
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 81
..........................Childproof Door . 88
............................Fuel Fill Door . 215
..........................Glove Box . 114, 115
.................................Power Door . 82
........................................Tailgate . 92
........................Low Coolant Level . 218
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 309
................................Lower Anchors . 43
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 323
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 222
...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 225
..................................Maintenance . 255
................................Minder . 257-263
......Main Items and Sub Items . 260
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 262
.................................Record . 264-265
.........................Minder Indicator . 65
..........................................Safety . 256
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 60, 310
.........................Meters, Gauges . 59, 66
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 214
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 108
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 221
.......................................Moonroof . 107
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 63
VSA (Vehicle Stability
..............................Assist) . 62, 240
..............................Washer Level . 65
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59
...............................Infant Restraint . 39
......................................Infant Seats . 39
............Tether Anchorage Point . 48
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 288
........Recommended Pressures . 289
.................................Inside Mirror . 108
.............................Inspection, Tire . 290
....................Installing a Child Seat . 42
............................Instrument Panel . 59
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75
..............Instruments and Controls . 57
...............................Interior Lights . 119
........................................Introduction . i
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 300
.......................................Jack, Tire . 301
................................Jump Starting . 305
Index
L
M
K
J
INDEX
V
Main Menu
...................Neutral Gear Position . 233
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 214
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 320
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 214
.........................................Odometer . 69
...............................Odometer, Trip . 67
....................Off-Highway Driving . 252
Oil
........................Change, How to . 268
......................Change, When to . 263
......................Checking Engine . 218
..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 309
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 267
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 329
............................Outside Mirrors . 109
....Outside Temperature Indicator . 69
....................Overheating, Engine . 307
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 262
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 214
..............Panel Brightness Control . 75
........................Park Gear Position . 232
...........................................Parking . 236
.................................Parking Brake . 78
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 60, 311
.................................Parking Lights . 74
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 236
....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 32
.............................PGM-FI System . 330
...................................Pollen Filter . 284
..........................Power Door Locks . 82
...............Power Socket Locations . 117
....................Power Steering Fluid . 276
............................Power Windows . 106
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16
........................Preparing to Drive . 229
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
........................Protecting Children . 34
.......................Protecting Infants . 39
.......Protecting Larger Children . 50
.........Protecting Small Children . 40
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 48
.............................Using LATCH . 43
...................Radiator Overheating . 307
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 129
.................Radio Theft Protection . 205
...........................Readiness Codes . 310
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 275
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 281
..................Rear Seat, Folding . 99, 102
..........................Rear View Mirror . 108
.................Rear Window Defogger . 77
.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 74
...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 94
........................................Refueling . 215
.......................Reminder Indicators . 59
.......................Remote Transmitter . 89
Replacement Information
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 284
Index
O
R
P
N
VI
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
................Engine Oil and Filter . 268
..........................................Fuses . 312
................................Light Bulbs . 277
....................................Schedule . 263
...........................................Tires . 288
.............................Wiper Blades . 285
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 21
..........Reporting Safety Defects . 336
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 218, 270
...............................Restraint, Child . 34
..................Reverse Gear Position . 232
...........................Reverse Lockout . 235
......................................Roof Rack . 224
................................Rotation, Tire . 291
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 336
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18
...............Additional Information . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 20
.....................................Cleaning . 283
...................Detachable Anchor . 104
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19
................................Maintenance . 20
Reminder Indicator and
......................................Beeper . 60
...................System Components . 18
...............Use During Pregnancy . 16
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14
..................................Seat Heaters . 105
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 94
.......................Select/Reset Button . 66
...............................Serial Number . 320
...........................Service Intervals . 263
...........................Service Manual . 337
.........Service Station Procedures . 215
..........................Setting the Clock . 206
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 231
........................Shift Lock Release . 235
................................Side Airbags . 9, 28
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 30
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 280
...............................Signaling Turns . 74
.....................................Snow Tires . 292
................................Sound System . 129
......................................Spare Tire . 298
....................................Spark Plugs . 322
........................Specifications . 322, 323
................................Speed Control . 209
................................Speed Limiter . 234
Index
S
INDEX
VII
Main Menu
＊
..........SRS, Additional Information . 22
...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
.............................Airbag Service . 33
......Airbag System Components . 22
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 31
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 25
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 30
.............................SRS Indicator . 31, 61
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81
.......................Starting the Engine . 230
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 230
................With a Dead Battery . 303
..............State Emissions Testing . 332
........Steam Coming from Engine . 307
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 78
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 81
.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 203, 209
...................Stereo Sound System . 129
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 295
........................................Sun Visor . 116
........................Sunglasses Holder . 116
Supplemental Restraint
..................................System .9,22
......................................Servicing . 33
.........................SRS Indicator . 31, 61
...................System Components . 22
..................................Synthetic Oil . 268
Table
........................................Center . 114
Tailgate
............................Open Indicator . 63
.................................Opening the . 92
..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 281
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 297
Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 324
.....Emissions Control Systems . 329
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 214
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 331
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)-Required Federal
........................Explaration . 327
.......................Temperature Gauge . 69
....................Temperature, Outside . 69
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 48
................Theft Protection, Radio . 205
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 326
..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 78
..........................Time, Setting the . 206
....................................Tire Chains . 292
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 299
...........................Tire Information . 324
...............................................Tires . 287
..............................Air Pressure . 289
........................................Chains . 292
.........................Checking Wear . 290
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 324
......................................Inflation . 288
..................................Inspection . 290
.....................................Labeling . 326
Low Tire Pressure
...........................Indicator . 64, 242
..............................Maintenance . 290
..Pressure Monitoring System . 243
...................................Replacing . 291
Index
T
VIII
Main Menu
＊
＊
......................................Rotating . 291
...........................................Snow . 292
............................Specifications . 323
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 299
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 245
...............Behind a Motorhome . 250
................Emergency Wrecker . 317
....Equipment and Accessories . 247
....................Pre-Tow Checklist . 248
.............................Weight Limit . 245
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
..................................System) . 242
...............................Indicator . 64, 242
Required Federal
............................Explanation . 327
.....................Trailer Loading . 245, 246
......................Trailer Towing Tips . 248
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 273
...........................Fluid Selection . 273
..............Identification Number . 320
.............Shifting the Automatic . 231
.....................................Treadwear . 324
.......................................Trip Meter . 67
....................................Turn Signals . 74
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55
..................Warranty Coverages . 335
Washers, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 272
.....................................Operation . 73
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 78
............Alignment and Balance . 291
..............................Wrench, Nut . 300
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 106
................Operating the Power . 106
...........................Rear, Defogger . 77
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 73
...................................Defroster . 128
.....................................Washers . 272
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 285
.....................................Operation . 73
....................................Worn Tires . 290
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 317
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 223
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 322
....Vehicle Identification Number . 320
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 240
.....................................Indicators . 62
.............................Vehicle Storage . 295
.....................................Ventilation . 126
.................................................VIN . 320
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 267
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 297
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 324
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 214
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 269
:U.S.only
Index
V
W
U
INDEX
IX
Main Menu
On 4WD model only
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Power Steering Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
15.3 US gal (58
)
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Front/Rear:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Compact Spare Tire:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
1.3 US qt (1.2
)
Capacity:
Honda Dual Pump Fluid. Do not
use ATF.
267
273
275
276
Main Menu
